Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. 1 .

2 .

and piping. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. electrical panels. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Add basic MEP elements. such as mechanical equipment. Add more detailed modelling elements. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and plumbing fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. and plumbing engineering workflows. 3 .Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Germany. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. fixtures. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. such as duct. electrical.

the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. you can choose to save your work. to provide a richer and more finished design. When you open a training file. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. In this exercise. Create schedules. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. NOTE Depending on your installation. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Metric file names have an _m suffix. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. So. however. and sheets to document the project. when you add ductwork. Metric: files for users working with metric units. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . and tags. is located and accessed in the training files location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. as well as how to open and save them. you learn where the training files are located. After completing each exercise. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. For example. annotations. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. such as templates and families. On the Contents tab. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. You do not design entire systems. For example. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. your Training folder may be in a different location.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. templates. When you install the training files as instructed. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Create detail views. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. views. However. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided.

6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and you can open any supported file type. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Imperial or Metric. For File name. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. the Open dialog displays. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. 3 In the right pane. click ➤ Save As. For example. a list of file types displays. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 8 If you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 4 Click the training file name. and click the Training Files icon.rvt and make changes.rvt) is selected. verify that Project Files (*. You may close the file with or without saving changes.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. enter the new file name. and click Save. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. select the folder in which to save the new file. scroll down. you are prompted to save the changes. and click Open.rvt. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. if you open settings. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. For Files of type. Accessing Training Files | 5 . you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.

6 .

every drawing sheet. the hierarchy of elements. 2D and 3D view. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the parameter is one of association or connection. the floor or roof remains connected. and plans. As you work in drawing and schedule views. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the operation of the software is parametric. the door retains this relationship to the partition. and schedules required for a building project. You learn the terminology. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. hence. drawing sheets. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. quantities. sections. If the length of the elevation is changed. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and phases when you need it. In this case. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. drawings.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. schedules. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. ■ ■ 7 . scope. In the Revit MEP model. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. If you move the partition. In this case. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic.

dimensions. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. boilers. boilers. sinks. walls and ceilings are hosts. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. levels. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. and electrical panels. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. They display in relevant views of the design. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sprinklers. Datum elements help to define project context. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. tags. filled regions. dimensions. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Examples include detail lines. sinks. ducts. and reference planes are datum elements. and 2D detail components. grids. ducts. For example. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. When you change something. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. They help to describe or document the design.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. For example. and electrical panels. and keynotes are annotation elements. tags. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. sprinklers. For example.

such as roofs. Most often. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. To place levels. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Project: In Revit MEP. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. section views.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. For example. for example. The project file contains all information for the building design. and so forth). and drawings of the design. By using a single project file. you can explicitly control them. or bottom of foundation. programming is not required. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. floors. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and ceilings. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. North . first floor. and types. from geometry to construction data. families. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . top of wall. elevation views. schedules. In Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. However. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. If you can draw. you must be in a section or elevation view. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. you do nothing to establish these relationships. This information includes components used to design the model. views of the project. Often. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. In other cases. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building.

Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). or layer the views to see only the one on top. showing. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. each in-place family contains only a single type. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. With a few clicks. and similar graphical representation. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. hiding. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). A type can be a specific size of a family. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. and wires. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. For example. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. System families include ducts. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. System families can be transferred between projects. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Then experiment with them. For example. Type: Each family can have several types. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Unlike system and standard component families.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. For example. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. A type can also be a style. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. You can also display several project views at one time. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. identical use. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . pipes. However. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.

To return the panel to the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button.

and CAD files. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select the tool first. data and systems. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and for switching views. architect-specific tools. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and settings.. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. then select what you want to modify. tools used for editing existing elements. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. project and system parameters. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. When working on the Modify tab.

This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. when adding duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). By default. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. provides requested information. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. To keep a panel expanded. For example. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. closes the application menu (double-click). provides access to common tools. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. displays frequently used tools. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.

(Save As) export the current drawing. select a file to open. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as Export and Publish. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name... (Open) save the current drawing. click.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. select a template and create a new drawing.. (Export) On the application menu.

and Walkthrough. (Print) access product and license information. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. (Publish) print the current drawing. Camera. (Licensing) close the file. publish the current project. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar..On the application menu. family. or template file. or template file.. family. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. To enable or disable a tool item. click. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. to. annotation... but is not enabled by default. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . annotation. saves a current project. provides views including Default 3D.

Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. or the Family Editor. Starting with the most recent command. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. workshared components. To hide the Status Bar. Clipboard. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). a tool tip appears next to the cursor. displaying the same information. check the Status Bar. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. In addition. repeat the command. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. When you are highlighting an element or component. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Modify. when you switch to another editing mode. To show the Status Bar again. This displays the command history in a list. Clear the Status Bar check mark. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. However. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type.To undo or redo a series of operations. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Group. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . When you are using a command.

do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. When you place an element in a drawing. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . To change existing elements to a different type. Place a Wall. for example. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. click (Modify). select one or more elements of the same category. On the Quick Access toolbar. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar.To cancel or exit the current command.

(The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. In the following steps. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. For example. After you are familiar with these tasks.rvt. Zoom the view In the tutorials.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. There are several ways to access zoom options. click Training Files. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 1 Click ➤ Open. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.

the view zooms in on the selected area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 9 To display SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. If you do not have a wheel mouse. on the Navigation bar. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. When you release the mouse button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. click . click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . 6 Click in the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. In the drawing area.

press ESC. 14 To exit the wheel. For more information about SteeringWheels. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and click tin the Options dialog. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click the SteeringWheels tab.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. Click and drag to orbit the design. ➤ Options. moving the wheel to the desired location. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. As you move the mouse. and then using the Zoom tool again. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.

display along the ends. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. After you are familiar with these tasks. referred to as shape handles. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. These are the drag controls. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Similar controls. and open Level 2 . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. bottoms. called drag controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . 2 Enter ZR.HVAC Plan . you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. as shown. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.Design. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Small blue dots.

on the Standard toolbar. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. In this example. or press CTRL+Z. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the Undo command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.3 Click and drag the bottom control. 6 On the Undo menu. select the first item in the list. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

Some commands. such as Move and Copy. After selecting the element to move. 11 With the duct already selected. and click again to specify the ending position. and drag it to the left as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . 10 Move the cursor to the right. for example. you want to move the duct. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. The duct is moved to the new position. In this case. click to specify the starting position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. as shown.

such as the Modify Ducts command. Click OK.End a command Some commands. 13 To end a command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Supply. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Select Mechanical . 14 Enter VG. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. For example. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Press ESC twice. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Return. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

under Template file. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 5 In the New Project dialog. system families. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings.rte template. the default building levels and standard views. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 27 . You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. link files. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. Finally. You can choose from several templates. In that case. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. such as the default project units and settings. under Create new. click Training files. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. settings. create and manage views. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and loadable families. select Project. you learn how to start a project from a template. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. click Browse. 6 Click OK. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. such as ducts and pipes. and click Open. You can either select a template from the template library. use copy/monitor. New projects inherit all the families. such as coordination review and interference checking.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. 2 In the New Project dialog. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. and modify system settings. and geometry from the starting template.

review the construction materials listed. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Click Cancel. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. select Project template. NH. click (Browse). 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. navigate to Imperial Templates. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. and open North. click Edit. If you want to use a template other than the default. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select Level 1. 10 Using the same method. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. Click OK twice. For example. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. In the Choose Template dialog. under Energy Analysis.rte template and click Open. create another new project using the Construction template. select Manchester. for Energy Data. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select School or University. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. Click OK. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads.7 In the Project Browser. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). When you select the material. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click Browse. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you can select it now. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ■ For Building Construction. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. ■ ■ Under Create new. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. (Browse). for City. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. For Location. 8 In the drawing area. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog.

20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Click OK twice. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. After standard settings have been established for an organization. plumbing. 10 1/2". they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 4 1/2". Holding CTRL. click Wiring. 22 In the right pane. 26 In the right pane. For Categories. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. under Pipe Settings. wiring. and fire protection systems. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. for 3 1/2". For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. click Sizes. for 3 1/2". Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 27 Click OK. 24 In the right pane. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. under Duct Settings. 33 Click OK. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. click Round. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. and demand factors for electrical systems. 5 1/2". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 11 1/2". 4 1/2". power distribution systems. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. click Rectangular. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 3/4". piping. 25 In the left pane. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. and 12 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . select Views.rfa and click Open. 23 In the left pane. select Identity Data. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and 5 1/2". 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.

you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 5 Click OK. select Associated Level. Click Open. Select Ascending Click OK twice. click Training. For Sort by. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 2 In the New Project dialog.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. For Then by. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. select Sub-Discipline. For Then by. 38 Close the file. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Auto . 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. under Create new. select Project. To enable this coordination.Origin to Origin. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. In addition. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. under Template file. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that the file is saved as a template. families. select View Name. sheets. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. select Family and Type. From the Positioning list. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i.rvt. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Linking Projects In this exercise. and groups that are contained in a project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. click Browse.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

➤ Open. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. click (Add Value). The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. Load. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and Import dialogs. click the My Library icon.11 In the Places dialog. Save. or families. and select it as the library path. 15 Under Library Name. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and click Open. and click OK twice. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and change the name to My Library. and click (Browse). templates. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click My Library.

click OK. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 9 In the text editor. 11 In the Options dialog. click Places. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 2 In the Options dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Ignore words in uppercase. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. custom color files. 5 In the text editor. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 20 Click ➤ Options. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Edit. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 21 On the File Locations tab. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. If you work in a large office. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 3 Under Settings. and decal image files. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. If you want to relocate this path. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. such as bump maps. This path is determined during installation. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . click the Spelling tab. 23 Click 24 Click OK.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 27 Click OK. click Edit. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. specify the new location here. enter sheetmtl-Cu. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. view the current path. 22 Select My Library. 19 Click Cancel. (Remove Value) to delete the library.

Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click the Spelling tab. 18 Click ➤ Options. 4 In the New Project dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 24 In the Options dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Close. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. In this exercise. 19 In the Options dialog. under Dimension Snaps. click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. under Template file. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.. click Edit. You can turn snap settings on and off. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. you modify snap settings. click OK. 23 In the text editor. work with snapping turned off. 25 Close the file without saving it. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Training Files.rte. 2 In the New Project dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. click File menu ➤ Save. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 22 In the text editor. click OK. 20 Under Settings. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and enter 1 . You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Restore Defaults. As you zoom in and out within a view.17 In the Spelling dialog. you modify snap increments.

For example. zoom out until it does so. such as ZO to zoom out. enter SM. This is the increment that you added previously. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. deselect Chain. click OK. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 8 In the Snaps dialog. TIP To zoom while sketching.7 Under Object Snaps. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. use the wheel button on your mouse. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and move the cursor to the right. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . If you do not have a wheel button. While sketching. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. snapping reverts to the system default settings. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. If it does not. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 10 On the Options Bar.

Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and the wall edges. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. the midpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 22 Move the cursor downward. 26 Close the file. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and specify the wall endpoint. 25 Click OK. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. Do not set the wall end point.. If you move the cursor along the wall. and delete the value 1’ . with or without saving it. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. it will snap to the endpoints. and move the cursor to the right. 19 Enter SM. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Make sure you also delete the semicolon.14 Click to set the wall endpoint.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

45 . In this exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. methodology. In this lesson. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. water source heat pump (WSHP). go to http://www. you will understand the process. As you create the mechanical system. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. At the end of the tutorial. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. If the tutorial training files are not present. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. However. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. duct system and a hydronic piping system. After finishing each exercise. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This system consists of a cooling tower.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. and then you create a plenum level. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you first configure the linked architectural model. By following the recommended workflow. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you first plan the system.

roof. click to select it. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In this section. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. click Training Files. Next. select Room Bounding. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. ceilings. and after the linked model highlights. These components are defined in the architectural training file. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. under Constraints. not in the MEP training file. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. you add a level for plenums. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and click OK. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE When working with a linked file.

Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). enter 8'. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and enter Level 2 Plenum. Preparing Spaces | 47 . Click Plan View Types. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation).6 In the Project Browser. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 9 On the Draw panel. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click OK. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and double-click West . The new level is placed. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 16 Press Esc. and in the Plan View Types dialog. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added.MEP. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. For Offset.

In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under Identity Data. for View Range. However. In this exercise. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. enter an Offset of 1' 0". Under Extents. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. and click Apply Default View Template. For View Classification. select MEP . and for Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. In the next exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model. NOTE After finishing each exercise. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Level Above (Level 3). for View Scale. Under View Depth. you can choose to save your work. for Default View Template. right-click Level 2 Plenum. for Level.Plenum. right-click Level 2 Plenum. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . and click Properties. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. ■ Click OK twice. 20 In the Project Browser. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. For Sub-Discipline. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select Plenum Plan. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. select Design. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Edit. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. enter 0. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. In this exercise. For Cut plane. for Top.

enter 0. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For Space. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.rvt. and ceilings). Placing Spaces | 49 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. walls. For Offset. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Upper Limit. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. select New.Space Plan is highlighted. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. select Level 2 Plenum. select Horizontal. For (Tag Location).

ensuring coordination between the files. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . Click OK. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 In the drawing area. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. for Number. For Name.7 Click to place the space. 9 Select the space. enter 219. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). enter Library.

For Offset. and then click Modify. 21 Using the method learned previously. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Placing Spaces | 51 . For Upper Limit. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. select Level 3.

22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. you place a space in a large corridor area. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. and then split the space using a space separation line. 23 Click OK. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. select Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar.rvt. and for Offset. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. for Upper Limit. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . enter 0.Space Plan is highlighted. and then press Esc. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. click Training Files. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 10 Using the same method. 9 In the floor plan. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. In the schedule. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and press Enter. as shown. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. which was numbered 219Q. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 11 Close the schedule view. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.7 In the Project Browser. enter Corridor. change the space number to 216A. double-click the space name. and scroll to the newly placed space. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator.

place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 .15 Press Esc twice. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.

Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). you place a space in a chase.rvt. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. indicating that it’s the active view. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . If necessary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.

12 Click in the section view. for Name. For Number. Under Identity Data. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 10 In the plan view. select Level 3. right-click. 6 Enter VG. enter Chase. and click Element Properties. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 225PC. and then click OK. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. click in the chase area to place the space. select the space. For Offset. enter 4'. select Interior and Reference. select Roof Level. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase.4 Press Esc. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 0. expand Spaces. for Upper Limit. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. for Upper Limit. On the Options Bar. In the plan view. For Limit Offset. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints.

17 Type ZF. In the next exercises. floors. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. All spaces in the view are tagged. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 15 Press Esc. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and maximize the view. ceilings. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. under Loaded Tags. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.Space Plan.Bounding elements (such as walls. select Space Tag With Volume. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . you view and verify zones in the System Browser. which removes the space from the Default zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. it is automatically added to the Default zone. under Spaces. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. click Reference. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ).rvt. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify that All Disciplines is selected.Zoning is highlighted. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. To display space reference lines. click View ➤ Zones. In this exercise. After a space is placed in an area. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and modify the zone properties. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you assign spaces to a zone. you assign spaces to zones in the building. and click OK. the Edit Zone tab displays.5 In the System Browser. under Spaces. under Energy Analysis. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. The Zone tool is active. indicating that it’s the active view. indicating that the space is occupiable. Using the Edit Zone tab. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and Electrical 220 spaces.Zoning is highlighted. and click Finish Editing Zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you can add or remove a space from the zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. click Reference. and verify the zones in the System Browser. As you do this. Instruction 221. 4 In the drawing area. select Occupiable. To display space reference lines. click Training Files. The graphic in the System Browser updates. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Computer Lab 222. and a new zone is created. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.

6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Expand HVAC Zones. type VG. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.In the System Browser. Instruction. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). select HVAC Zones. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 5 With the drawing area active. you need to activate the zone visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area. Click OK.

and click OK. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verify the zone in the System Browser. under Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. for Name. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. under Identity Data.West . expand 2 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.Zoning. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. enter 2 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. click Finish Editing Zone. click Reference. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.West . 9 In the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .rvt. 11 Close the System Browser. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. indicating that it’s the active view. You activated zone visibility in the views.Area B.Zoning is highlighted. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i.

12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 8 In the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2".Zoning view. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning view. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.5 Click in the Level 1 .Zoning floor plan. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 15 Press Esc. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view to activate it. zoom out. Select Attached End. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.

The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning view. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and click OK.East. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. double-click the zone tag. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. for Name Value. click Training Files. and zone information. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. on the ViewCube.Zoning to make it the active view. enter Lounge . 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Front. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In this exercise. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. double-click Level 1 . You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. click the corner where the Top. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you verify the building.rvt.

The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. and select 109 Lounge. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. Click (Highlight). Using the Highlight tool.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Next. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . click (Isolate). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you isolate the space. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. verify that Wireframe is selected. With 109 Lounge selected. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view.

For Electrical Loads. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK. select Lounge/Recreation. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. Next. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and in the People dialog. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. the space information displays for the selected space. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. click . scroll down in the left pane. For Construction Type. select 109 Lounge. verify that <Building> is selected. and then click OK. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.■ On the Details tab. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. ■ ■ ■ Next. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones. click . For People. and then click OK. select 1_South_Lounge. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. click . You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone.

and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. and humidification set point.00 °F : 90. For Heating Information. floors. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. click (Shading). roofs. and other room-bounding components. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.00 °F : N/A is specified. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. Below the list of spaces and zones. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. 12 Using the methods learned previously.00 °F : N/A is specified. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point.00 °F : 54. verify that 70. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and dehumidification set point. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. cooling air temperature. This indicates the outdoor air per person. outdoor air per area. and air changes per hour. heating air temperature. This indicates the heating set point. verify that 74. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that <Building> is selected. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. For Cooling Information. Next.

enter 0. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Plenum. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). For Offset. Under Energy Analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Under Energy Analysis. open MEP . 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter 212P. 15 In the Project Browser. For Name. for Number. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select Plenum. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. select Level 3. Because this is an unoccupied space. click Cancel.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK.

verify that Manchester.Space Plan. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . for Energy Data. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ .rvt. enter 03101. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. For Location. NH. On the Place tab. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click in the Value field. In this exercise. space. for City. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. is selected. For Postal Code. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. double-click Level 2 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and select space Plenum 212P. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and zone information. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. you verified building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. click Edit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select School or University. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone.

select Specified. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and click OK. For Condition Type. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. for Values. you need to select this option. select Specified. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. both. ■ On the Weather tab. Click OK twice. In order to select a space. ft.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. and then click . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that New Construction is selected. click Edit. a cooling load. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. If. under Volume Computations. For Building Construction. For Export Complexity. and click OK. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. For Project Phase. enter 200 Btu/h. select Heated and cooled. For Ground Plane. For Space Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. right-click. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Values. and click Element Properties. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For Sensible. select space Library 219. For People. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Level 1 is selected. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. for Building Service. and click OK. this option adjusts the times automatically. verify that 1' 0" is specified. click in the Value column. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). 8 In the drawing area. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. select Library . Select Area per person. and enter 50 sq. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. For Latent. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance.Audio Visual. verify that <Building> is specified. or neither. enter 150 Btu/h.

verify that Manchester. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Next. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . select 219 Library. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and can be modified here. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. For Electrical Loads. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . for Values. click Calculate. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. For Location. You have verified the building information. There should be no warnings displayed. and click to learn the cause for the warning. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Actual. select Actual. click Information). See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. You should correct the space error in the building model. For Building Construction. and under Heating Information. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 12 Click the Details tab. Select the space associated with the warning. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). NH. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. is specified. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. click Edit.■ ■ ■ Click OK. and click OK. for Values. For Building Service. verify that School or University is selected. Click OK twice. Under Power. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. verify that <Building> is specified. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.

You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 19 In the drawing area. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. or zone information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. click to the right of the building to place the legend. under Energy Analysis. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 17 In the loads report.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Space Plan. 21 Click OK. select HVAC Zones. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. In this exercise. or make any changes to the model. space. 16 After you review the loads report. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. and zone information for the building model. 15 Review the loads report for project. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Color Scheme. click Training Files. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . weather. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. Click OK. and a loads report displays. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise.rvt. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 .After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. select 219 Library. space. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 3 In the drawing area. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

5 Zoom in to the legend. select Tonnage Range. in 1-ton increments. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select the color scheme legend. under Schemes. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. and click OK.

The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 11 Using the method learned previously. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. select New Construction. enter Space Airflow Schedule. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i.12 Close the file with or without saving it. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Space Fill is the active view. For Phase. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . select Spaces.rvt. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. click Training Files. For Name. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. for Select available fields from. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In this exercise. more category options are available. Select Schedule building components. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. In the next exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document.

select Calculated Supply Airflow. enter Airflow Delta. In the Fields dialog. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. Click OK. For Then by. and Blank line. select Not Between. select Level. and then click . For Type. select Air Flow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. Select Ascending.■ Under Available fields. Header. and click OK. Select Formula. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. for Formula. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Discipline. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. click (Browse). ■ Click Calculated Value. For Fields. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Conditional Format. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. and then select Hidden field. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. select Number. In the Calculated Value dialog. select Level. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Formula. select HVAC. select Airflow Delta. enter .

click the color swatch.■ ■ ■ For Value. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. Under Conditions to Use. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In the Color dialog. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. select red. For Background Color. In later exercises. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. In this exercise. right-click to access schedule properties. and click OK. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. ■ The schedule displays. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. Click OK twice. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . verify that Show is highlighted. a view opens that contains the selected space. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next lesson. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM.

78 .

As you place the air terminals. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. Then. you will create supply air systems. After system creation.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you modify air terminal parameters. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. and work with the airflow schedule. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. In this lesson. 79 . you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After completing the air systems lesson.

2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.rvt. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the ceiling view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and scroll to space 223. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.

Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. click Place on Face. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 17 Move the cursor down. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and press Enter. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. for Flow.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. If the host element is modified or moved.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Also. verify that Constrain is cleared. the hosted elements are updated as well. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 15 On the Options Bar. enter 425 CFM. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and select Supply Diffuser . which in this case is the ceiling grid.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . as shown. type 12. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Placement panel. and press Enter. select the diffuser. and then press Esc to end the command.

rfa. 25 In the drawing area.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. select one of the diffusers. clear Leader.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 24 In the Open dialog. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. click Place on Face. As you place the return diffusers. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. click Yes. as shown. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. Next. 22 In the drawing area. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click Open. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 27 Select Return Diffuser . you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.

35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . for Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. under Other. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. and click to select the lines. Level. select one of the return diffusers. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Strong Reference. 31 In the alert dialog. click Yes. 32 In the Project Browser. and click OK. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. as shown.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. click the Level 1 line. and click OK. for Constraints ➤ Offset. For the start point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. enter 9' 0"2750. ■ ■ For the end point. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 44 Zoom in to space 115. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.HVAC Plan .rvt. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. the space crossing lines display. You then create the logical connection between the system components. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. including energy analysis. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.Press Esc. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. indicating that it’s the active view. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click View ➤ Systems. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. right-click the title. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. After creating the logical connection. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. When you highlight a space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. However. In the left pane of the Open dialog. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .

all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 11 In the drawing area. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 6 Keep the System Browser open.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. On the Options Bar. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 In the System Browser. review the Number of Elements. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 15 Click Cancel. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. and Flow value. Connect Into. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. As you add diffusers to systems. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. System Name. the number of elements is updated. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.

The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. under Mechanical. 22 Click OK. for Mark. for System Name. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 25 Click OK. 18 Click OK. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space).17 Using the method learned previously. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. the air terminals are the children. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . which updates the name in the System Browser. under Identity Data. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 26 Click Finish Editing System. Rename the system Next. In this exercise. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the system connects them. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this case. the Network type provides several solutions. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).HVAC Plan. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. which provides various layout tools. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select the upper left diffuser. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. indicating that it’s the active view. and display solution 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Also. the space crossing lines display. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. for Solution Type. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. A Generate Layout tab displays. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 4 In the drawing area. select Network. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.Design is highlighted.

enter 9' 10 1/2". For Flex Duct Type. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. For Offset. click Settings. Select Branch. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. as shown. For Offset. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. enter 3'. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Duct Type. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Duct Type. click Modify. Click OK. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. you’ll get an error in a later step.7 On the Options Bar. enter 9' 10 1/2". 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers.Round.

Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the duct. or offset elevations are incorrect.11 Click Finish Layout. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . select a different layout solution. For example. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. as is the elbow itself.

Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. If the entire network does not highlight. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. but not all values are used in this view. under Graphics. a disconnection exists. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend.Flow. for Color Scheme. and then click OK. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. highlight a segment of the main duct. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click OK. fittings. Usually. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. for Values Displayed. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and equipment. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. and click to select it. select By View. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. select Duct Color Fill . you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. The first time you press Tab. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Using a flow-based color scheme. thus it is not part of the system. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.

and click OK. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.Velocity. for Flow.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). select Duct Color Fill . under Mechanical . decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. select one of the diffusers in the system. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the color scheme legend. 20 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.Airflow. and press Enter. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and on the Options Bar. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. for Schemes. select the WSHP.

and then click to select it. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select Only.08 in-wg/100ft. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and drag it to the right. select Calculated Size Only. Under Constraints. select Friction.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. The ductwork and fittings are updated. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and enter . press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Restrict Height. highlight a segment of the duct. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and select 16". click Cancel. Click OK. for Branch Sizing. Select the upper segment of main duct.

33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Use the information that displays (flow. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). static pressure.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Using this tool. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). so that you can modify the system design accordingly. pressure.

rvt. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.NOTE As you inspect a system. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . also known as the critical path. 35 Click Finish. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct.

and click Draw Duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Design is highlighted. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select the WSHP.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view.

click the corner where the Top.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.3D MEP. and click Draw Duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 11 On the Options Bar. select 9' 10 1/2". and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Front. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 In the Project Browser. for Offset. 15 On the ViewCube. NOTE When drawing duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. double-click MEP . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. select the top right diffuser. right-click the connector grip. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it is considered a closed loop. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 22 Using the same method. the color fill indicates the flow value. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. in space 115. The ductwork is automatically created. Also. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view.

Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 25 Press Esc.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. and click to select it. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 30 Press Esc twice. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and then click Modify.

and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. under Constraints. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. select a segment of the main duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.Airflow. such as a plenum. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. clear Restrict Height. and then click OK. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 40 Using the same method. for Flow. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical .

You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Then.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Create return and supply piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. In this lesson. 109 . Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.

110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . on level 3 of the building model.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you place mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Left Return . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. in corridor 328.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .High Efficiency .2-6 Tons . indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.HVAC Plan . verify that Wall faces is selected.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Horizontal . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and select WSHP . 7 On the Options Bar. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .

11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and in the Type Selector.8 Click the corridor wall face. as shown. and click to place the dimension. as shown. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and enter 2'. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 10 Select the WSHP. click the top edge of the WSHP. click the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

for Offset. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Water Flow. select the 2 WSHPs.14 Click Modify. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 9'. Under Mechanical. enter 12 GPM. Click OK. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down.

Create the logical connection between the system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including flow and pressure. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.21 Click Modify. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you create the return and supply piping systems.

and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. but without a corresponding system. You can create pipes to connect system components. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. where it is easier to review the information. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Creating a Piping System | 115 . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. 5 In the System Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.Mech 330). Unlike logical connections (systems). physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .HVAC Plan . and click View ➤ Piping. analyses cannot be performed. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. right-click the Systems column heading. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. while pressing Ctrl. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Notice that on the Options Bar.In the System Browser. and the Edit System tool is not active. for System Name. As you assign equipment to systems. 12 In the drawing area. select the boiler. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. This display indicates that the system is selected. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. 10 On the Options Bar. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Therefore. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. select the 2 WSHPs.

19 In the Project Browser. under Design ➤ HVAC . 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Creating a Piping System | 117 . You have created the hydronic return system. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.Design. double-click Roof . and select the cooling tower. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.13 Click Finish Editing System.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. for System Name. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 17 On the Options Bar.

The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 23 Close the roof plan view. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and bypasses the cooling tower. 25 Select the boiler. and click OK. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In cooling mode. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). expand the Hydronic Return system category. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. In heating mode. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 28 Using the same method. indicating the logical connection. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.22 In the Select Connector dialog. and click Select. 29 Right-click CHWS. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click Expand All. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs.

31 In the Column Settings dialog. under Mechanical. and click OK. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Column Settings. You also manually modify the layout path as required. enter 18 GPM. you can view several parameters. 32 In the System Browser. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Water Flow. and click OK.In the System Browser. expand Piping. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .

click Check None. When you draw a box to select components. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 5 In the Filter dialog. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. A system preview displays in red. the boiler.Mech 330).Design is highlighted. select Mechanical Equipment. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. you can place the cursor over a system component. 9 In the Select a System dialog.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. click Training Files. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). then the Select a System dialog displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and click to select it. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the system. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. select CHWR.HVAC Plan . 10 Click OK. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Notice that all components within the Level 3 . IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.

12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. or architectural components. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . It does not reference the architecture. select Perimeter. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. duct.11 On the Options Bar. structural beams. 13 Click Cancel. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. click Settings. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 1' 6''. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. verify that Solutions is selected.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.16 Click Finish Layout. 19 In the drawing area. and the flow for the other is 12. the flow for one WSHP is 18. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 17 Optionally. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. and press Tab 3 times. With each Tab. to display the path with thinner lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.

24 Press Esc. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and access its instance properties. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). under Mechanical. and click OK.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the boiler. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 23 Under Mechanical.

which propagates flow throughout the system. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. click Edit System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Design.HVAC Plan . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Next. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. the Number of Elements is now 8. Logically. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 28 In the Project Browser. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. double-click Level 1 . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. On the Options Bar. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).Design ➤ Floor Plans. 27 On the System Tools panel. you physically close the CHWR loop.

review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 35 Using the drag control. under Mechanical. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. as shown. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Using the same method. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. select a WSHP.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. access its instance properties. and click Cancel.

enter 0''/12''.40 In the Select a System dialog. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. For Slope. For Inset. Click Settings. 41 Click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and then click OK. select CHWS. enter 1' 6''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

46 Click Modify. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . as shown. 48 While pressing Ctrl.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. In a later exercise. as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 47 In the drawing area. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. or manually modify the pipe. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect.50 Using the same method. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Either relocate the system components. Add piping to close the supply loop. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 51 Click Finish Layout. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. To create the piping system.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ 3D Views. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. and the return pipes are magenta. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . click Training Files.HVAC Plan . double-click 3D HVAC Building.

as shown. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 7 In the plan view. select the section of piping.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Click to move the piping. select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. and press Esc to clear the selection.

An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. and click OK. The connections are automatically created. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and click Draw Pipe. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 13 In the plan view. 12 In the 3D view. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. select the return pipe riser. and the lower one is secondary. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. select the boiler. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected.

Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .7''. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and you select 1 connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ Move the cursor down. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. enter 1' . 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.In a plan view. and press Enter. for Offset. enter 2'.

select the primary base mounted pump. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 18 Press Esc twice. and click OK. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 19 In the plan view. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. As you place piping runs that are close together. and select it. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and the appropriate fittings are created. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump.

26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 27 Move the cursor to the right. right-click the bottom connector. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 29 If necessary. 28 Press Esc.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click to draw the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. and click the minus symbol. you select the tee fitting. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 33 Press Esc.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. right-click the discharge connector. select the primary base mounted pump. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 4'. and click Draw Pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.

zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . as shown. these pipe connections were created automatically. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. enter 9' 6''. type 1'. ■ Move the cursor down. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click to create the pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.

and click Element Properties. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Next. you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. right-click.

39 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the cooling tower. under Mechanical. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 44 In the 3D view. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. the value is 0 GPM. When you create the pumps in parallel. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 43 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 41 Using the same method. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 46 Press Esc.50 or 50% of the Flow. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. for Cooling Water Flow. right-click. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 48 In the plan view. 40 Click Cancel. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. and click Element Properties. 42 Click OK. under Mechanical. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). notice that under Mechanical. In the Instance Properties dialog. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . Connect the cooling tower Next. and click OK. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .

50 In the 3D View. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. click Training Files. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). When the valve is open. and close the dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. and is heated by the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Valves In this exercise. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. the water bypasses the cooling tower. select the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM.

verify that the Diameter value is 3''. as shown. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 On the Options Bar. The bypass valve is closed by default. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design is highlighted. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. Adding Valves | 143 . and select Ball Valve . 8 Press Esc twice.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Select Ball Valve . 14 Using the same method. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. place another Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve.10 Press Esc. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

under Mechanical. and select Ball Valve . 20 Select the bypass valve. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. verify that Flow is 0 GPM.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. In heating mode. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 19 Using the same method. right-click. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Adding Valves | 145 . and click OK. and select Ball Valve . You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.rvt. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .22 Using the method you just learned. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Initially. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.

7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. and click OK. click Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Size. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Pipe Color Fill . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. Sizing Pipe | 147 .Flow.

10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 13 Press Esc. and for Velocity. and enter 2. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select And. for Branch Sizing. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Under Constraints. and click to select the branch. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. select Friction. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.25 FT/100ft. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). enter 5 FPS. Click OK.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i.Design ➤ 3D Views. Using the System Inspector. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. click Training Files. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . or offset elevations are incorrect. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Inspecting the System | 149 . pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.rvt. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Either relocate the system components. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution.

This information helps you modify the system design. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. as required. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. and pressure information including pressure loss. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). An inspection flag reports the section number. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. flow. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.

Checking Piping Systems | 151 . and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. inspect Section 6 again. and the Pressure Loss is 1.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. and to size pipe. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. for Fluid Temperature.67 psi. targeting those systems that need attention. select 90° F. you need to validate them. 9 Using the same method. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.89 psi. 10 Click Finish. the Static Pressure is 7. In this exercise. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open.88 psi. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. and click OK.

HVAC Plan . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. right-click the Systems titlebar.rvt. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 6 In the Project Browser. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. the pipe is associated with that system. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them.Design. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. and double-click Level 3 . For example. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. After you assign components to a system. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Warnings display. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. If you place components without assigning them to a system. 7 In the System Browser. and click View. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. 4 In the System Browser.Design. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. After you have assigned all components to systems. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. and click Show to view all of the system components. double-click Level 1 . Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. In the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . As you learned when placing components. and for pipe sizing. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. 9 Right-click CHWS. thus assigning the components to a system.HVAC Plan . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).

14 Using the methods that you learned. otherwise.HVAC Plan . and select Level 3 . 13 Right-click CHWR. 10 Using the same methods. right-click Hydronic Return. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.TIP If you have multiple views open. 12 In the System Browser. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. expand the Unassigned folder. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. click Close. and click Expand All.Design floor plan. and confirm unassigned system components. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Define required lighting.

In this exercise you review electrical settings. ■ ■ For Material. wiring. For Temperature.rvt. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. distribution systems. You also add a wiring type. select Wiring Types. select Copper. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Select Correction Factor. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. click (Open). enter THHN. Click OK. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select 75.04.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 1. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ Click New Correction Factor. select Copper. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. For Temperature Rating. click Training Files. ■ ■ For Factor.Wire Sizes. select 90. speeding up the design phase. As you place components and create circuits. For Material. expand Wiring .

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ For Value. for Custom Colors. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click Background Color. Click OK three times. select Red. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.

you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Use the System Browser to check your design.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. as you place lighting fixtures. power circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Create power loads. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Then. Create a panel schedule. First. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. 167 .

select Average Estimated Illumination. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. By using orange as the color for this range. Under Scheme Definition.Lighting Color Fill view is open. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .00 fc. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Basic Colors. In the Color dialog. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select the color legend. You can create additional color schemes. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements.rvt. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. for the Spaces Category. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.00 fc. select the color for Less Than 20. select Orange. click Training Files. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. Click OK.

all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. zoom to space Library 219.5 fc range. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.277. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.5 fc range is satisfied. The red field will clear once the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.7 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 13 Click the Level 2 .5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. which is the lowest value in the specified range. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling plan. 8 In the Project Browser. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 23 Click OK. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the fixtures will move accordingly. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 18 Click to place the fixture.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. select Multiple. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 25 On the Options Bar. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected.

28 In the drawing area. select the 3 fixtures.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 27 Press ESC to end the command.

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.32 Press ESC. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 36 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. Click OK. click Check None.277V. select Lighting Fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

select Multiple Alignment. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.277V. 42 In the drawing area.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . The lighting delta is satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . click the ceiling grid line as shown. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 41 On the Options Bar.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.45 Press ESC to end the command. In the next exercise.

2 Tile the views as shown.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type.Lighting Color Fill plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . scroll to view space space Library 219. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Lighting Plan.

enter . click the value for Initial Intensity. for Lamp. Under Photometrics.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.93. select 463T5_S. ■ Under Photometrics.85. select Xenon and click OK. for Apparent Load.277V and click OK. ■ Click OK twice. for Type Mark. In the Name dialog. enter 162. Click OK. select T5 [HO]. enter F15. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.ies and click Open. and click OK. ■ Click Apply. enter . In the Select File dialog. for Ballast Loss Factor. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Under Electrical. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. Under Identity Data. Under Photometrics. specify 15000. for Color Preset. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. click the value for Initial Color.00 VA.00 lm. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. click the value for Light Loss Factor. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. select Luminous Flux. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 .

and for Category. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. click Check None. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.277V. Click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select the top center fixture. 15 In space Library 219. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Note the lighting delta updates again.Press Delete.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. In the next exercise. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. you add switches. Junction Boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Placing Switches. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Junction Boxes.Press Delete. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Placing Switches. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. and Receptacles | 183 . click (Open). junction boxes. and receptacles to your design.

7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.277V. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.

NoLoad. Select Junction Boxes . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. and Receptacles | 185 . Placing Switches. 12 In the Load Family dialog.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.rfa and click Open. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Junction Boxes. 9 Press ESC to end the command. The element type Junction Boxes .

you can enter a space to separate the unit values. for Level 2 . Click Edit Type. NOTE When entering values. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. enter JB-1NL.14 Press ESC to end the command. for Mark. enter 9’0”. zoom to space Library 219. In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 21 In the drawing area. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. Under Electrical.Offset. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 15 Select the junction box. note the Number of Poles is 1.

24 For any column. and Number of Elements. Select Size. and Receptacles | 187 . Select Load. Expand Electrical. NOTE If necessary. Junction Boxes. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. 23 In the System Browser. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Expand General. and Voltage. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Space Number. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. right-click and click Column Settings. 26 In the System Browser. Click OK. Placing Switches. Distribution System. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Space Name.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.

Placing Switches. 38 Select the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. and Receptacles | 189 . 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Junction Boxes.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 42 Move the cursor down. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.

and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command.

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

zoom to the space Electrical 220. click (Open). click Training Files. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.rvt.equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. 2 In the drawing area. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and work toward the higher voltage. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . For Panel Name. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Surface: 100A. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter PP-2B. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads. #1 Pole Breakers. select 480/277 Wye.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 15 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the panelboard. enter 20. for Max. for Distribution System.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 8 Select the panelboard. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Distribution System.

For Panel Name. zoom to space Instruction 221.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . which is the logical connection between the elements. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 20 In the drawing area. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. click Check None. enter LP-2B. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. #1 Pole Breakers.Loads. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. and for Category. enter 20. 23 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. for Max. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

28 Press ESC to end the command. 33 Select the switch on the right. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 32 Press ESC. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

enter 2. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Wires. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. except without wire. and for Category. Click OK. for Hot Conductors. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. click Check None. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221.Loads. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click (Open). Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 41 In the Filter dialog. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .

■ 16 In the System Browser. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. and then expand circuit 1. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. expand Power. and Voltage Drop are selected. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Electrical. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. Voltage. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. and verify that Load. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. right-click on the Systems heading. Rating. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 13 In the System Browser. Distribution System.

25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. change the Voltage to 277V. under Electrical. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 30 Close the System Browser. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel.

click Edit Type. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. note the label parameters and click Cancel. for Type Mark. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Click OK. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 40 Click OK twice. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. click below the first one to place it. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 47 In the drawing area. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. enter FR4. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. Click Tags. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Click Yes. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. select Break. 56 In the Filter dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Next you create a switch system. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 52 In the Save As dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. select Lighting Fixture Tags. For Circuit Number. and for Category. Click OK. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. Click Save. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures.rfa. Deselect Break and for Suffix. and click Apply. for File Name. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. enter a comma. click Check None. Click OK. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.

6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 2 In the drawing area. for Switch ID. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. click (Open). 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical Lighting. Click OK. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. click Training Files. enter a.

Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. under Electrical . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. for switch ID. enter b. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. Click OK. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. lighting. select the PP-2B panel. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. click Check None. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 7 In space Electrical 220. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. 4 In the Filter dialog. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and data systems. and for Category. click (Open).rvt. select Electrical Fixtures. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Next you create a circuit and size wire. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Circuits are used for power.

navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 13 Select the wire again. for Ground Wire Tick Mark.rfa. and click Open. and in the drawing area. for Hot Conductors. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. under Electrical .Loads. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Wiring. Click OK. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 15 In the Load Family dialog. and in the right pane.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. enter 2. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. select Long Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 19 Click OK.

and click to select the circuit. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. 22 In space Electrical 220.

add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. in space Instruction 221.26 Press Delete. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 28 In the drawing area. click the connector of the first receptacle. as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select panel LP-2B. 2 In the drawing area. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 3 In the Electrical space.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.rvt. click Open. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to space Electrical 220. Finally. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. click Training Files. Next you balance the loads for your design. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.

14 Close the warning dialog. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Click OK. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Under Electrical-Loads. Scroll down. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 1-#12. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .3712 VA. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and Phase C provides 2028 VA. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. enter 30A. 1-#12. 6 Click OK. 1-#10. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 1-#10. click Rebalance Loads. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A.3616 VA). and Phase C . for Rating. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Phase B 3636 VA.

and click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Loads. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. click (Open). Select PP-2B.15 Select panel PP-2B. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. and click OK.Loads. under Electrical . click Training Files. for Rating. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . under Electrical . 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Click OK. Next you create a panel schedule. enter 25A. for Rating. 17 Close the warning dialog. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. enter 30A. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog. Under Header Text. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 11 Click OK twice. under Other. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 6 In the Project Browser. enter 1/8. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Panel Schedules. click Training Files. for Appearance. click Edit. Under Body Text. for Font Size. and open E601 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Font. select Berlin Sans FB. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.rvt. 5 In the Project Browser. select Bold and Italic. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Header Text. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 4 Close the report. enter 3/32. click (Open). The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. expand Sheets (all). This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 7 Select the schedule.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Font Size.

8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. In the System Browser. press TAB once. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Checking Your Design | 215 . Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. select space Lounge 212. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the System Browser. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Unassigned. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. each with a load of 180VA. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2.

click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 17 In the drawing area. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 18 Select panel LP-2C. under Warnings. zoom to space Electrical 214. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Close the details dialog. for Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. select MDP-1.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 15 In the dialog. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

Vent. click Duplicate. in addition to loading existing families. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Properties. Adding a pipe size. 219 . 2 In the Project Browser. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Name dialog. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Design is open. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and click OK. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. In this exercise. type PVC . right-click PVC .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Sanitary. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan .rvt. planning is critical to a successful design. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you create a PVC pipe type. In this lesson. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.

rfa. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 13 In the right panel.Sch 40 . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 27/32''. PVC . 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Tee Vent . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 17 In the left pane. under Mechanical. under Pipe Types. select Sanitary. In the Project Browser. click Modify. 26 Click OK. select Plastic. select None.DWV. and click OK. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . For Offset.DWV: Standard. 21 In the right pane. enter 10°. for Nominal.Sch 40 .Sch 40 . Cross. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.PVC . 18 For System Type. for Material. and click Main. 25 For Outside. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Sanitary. enter 5/8''. select Tee.DWV: Standard. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 10 On the Selection panel. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.PVC . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.PVC . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . click Pipe Settings. click Training Files. select Branch. Tap. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 15 For System Type. enter 1/2''. Tee. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 6 Click OK. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 For the new pipe size. enter -4' . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P .0''. 22 Click New Size. 24 For Inside Diameter. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Vent is listed. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.

Create the sanitary plumbing system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping. sanitary piping. vent. Create the cold water system. 221 . Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. including plumbing fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the hot water system. add a hot water heater.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system.

including the men’s room (space Male 107). 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 1 urinal. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and verify that Level 1 .rvt. you add 2 toilets.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. NOTE To identify a space name and number. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.Design is open. as shown. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.Plumbing Plan . and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.

1 wall-mounted urinal.1. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. in the Type Selector. 4 On the Element panel.6 gpf.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.Wall Mounted. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . select Public . under Water Closet . 5 On the Placement panel. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. and 3 sinks.Flush Valve . against the left wall. as shown.

Wall Hung. zoom in closer. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. above the first in the standard toilet space. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. under Urinal . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the reference line to center the fixture. and press Esc.) 8 Press Esc. (Again.7 Click to place another toilet.

you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. click Place on Face. under Floor Drain . In placing the fixture. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . select 5''x5'' Strainer .2'' Drain. 12 On the Placement panel.Rectangular.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 14 Click Modify. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. a urinal. and click View ➤ Piping. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. right-click in the System Browser table heading. click Training Files.rvt.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and a floor drain. and review the components listed under this system. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. In this exercise. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . 6 In the plan view. 8 In the Filter dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. and verify that Level 1 . and click OK. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. enter Sanitary 107. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. You include the bathroom space number in the name.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. 12 On the Edit System panel. 13 In the Systems Browser. so the Create Sanitary System is available. expand Sanitary. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. If you deselected the drain. click Finish Editing System. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system.

15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Sanitary 107. select one of the components in the system. a toilet. The base is placed. as shown. for example.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog. and click OK. at the midpoint of the detail lines. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.

25 On the Options Bar. The default settings are automatically modified. for Solution Type. and modify it to meet project requirements. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 21 On Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select Intersections.19 On the Options Bar. select Branch. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. for Offset. click Solutions. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1/8'' / 12''. select Main. You accept this suggested solution. 24 In the left pane. for Slope. enter -1' 0''. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 27 Click Modify. and click OK. 23 For Offset. for Diameter. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and click Settings. and for Offset. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 26 On the Options Bar. enter -4'-0”. select 4''. 20 On the Generate Layout panel.

select the vertical route path segments. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

30 In the 3D view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 31 Click Modify. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown.

click Finish Layout.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 34 On the Generate Layout panel. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the fitting and click to reorient it.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . as shown. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. adding sinks in the men’s room. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and check the slope control.

click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select 22''x22'' .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 On the Element panel.Rectangular. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown.rvt. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 5 On the Placement panel. and verify that Level 1 .Public. in the Type Selector.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. under Lavatory . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.

7 Click Modify. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. On the Options Bar. TIP When entering dimensions. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . and press Enter to create a second sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. select Multiple. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. For example. enter 2' 4''. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. 8 Select the sink.

Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 16 On the Edit System panel. click Add To System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. click Finish Editing System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks. Press Esc. and press Enter to create the third sink.

and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 19 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . under Design ➤ Plumbing . and click Draw Pipe. use the ViewCube to orient the view. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). as shown. 22 In the plan view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views.In the System Browser. 21 Select the tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the fitting. with the tee fitting selected. double-click 3D Plumbing.

240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. enter 1/8'' / 12''. In this example. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. enter 2' . 27 Click Modify. and click Apply.6''. for Slope. press Spacebar. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. When you press the Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. for Offset.

30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the double wye fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. under Wye 45 Deg Double . 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard. move the cursor over the stub pipe.Sch 40 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .DWV. click to place the fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 31 Click Modify.PVC .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

right-click the right connector. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. zoom in to the double wye fitting. for Offset. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 6''. enter 1'. you add pipe segments to the double wye.33 With the fitting selected. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. on the Options Bar. 37 Select the fitting. In the next steps. 34 Press Esc. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 36 In the section view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter.

as shown. 42 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). and click to place the pipe. 40 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

47 Move the cursor down. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 49 Using the same method. 48 Click Modify. 46 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. enter 6''. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the bottom connector. and press Esc. press Spacebar. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.

and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 56 Using the same method.PVC . select Standard. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 54 Click Modify. under Trap P . 51 In the Type Selector. 55 In the 3D view.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 52 In the plan view. select the P-Trap on the left. 53 Using the same method.Sch 40 .DWV.

Move the cursor to the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 58 Using the same method. select the left P-Trap. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe.. Click Modify. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. enter 6''. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Select the double wye pipe on the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. In the plan view. Click in the plan view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and press Enter. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

and select a proposed solution. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select PVC Sanitary. under Pipe Types. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . while pressing Ctrl. Press Esc. On the Routing Solutions panel. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select the section of pipe you just drew. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.■ In the 3D view.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. and verify the slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. for Slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. 62 On the Options Bar.rvt. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. click Finish.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. click Training Files. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.

DWV. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. select the vertical stack.Floor level line. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 10 In the 3D view. select the elbow fitting on the right. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Design.Plumbing Plan . 3 In the Section view. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Design. select Standard. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Overall. and click to draw the pipe. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the top connector.Sch 40 . 7 On the Selection panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Select the tee. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.PVC . and click the intersection to place the fitting.

11 Click Modify. as shown. 17 In the Type Selector. 12 Select the fitting. 13 Click the rotate control once. under Plug . select Standard.Sch 40 . 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1'-0”. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 18 In the plan view. 14 On the Options Bar.PVC . 15 Press Esc.DWV. for Offset.

you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.Plumbing Plan .19 Click Modify. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and verify that Level 1 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.

For Offset. 14 In the System Browser. 6 In the left pane. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. select Main. under Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views. select Domestic Hot Water. draw a selection box to select the toilets.Overall.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. double-click 3D Plumbing . select Plumbing Fixtures. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Branch. expand Unassigned. and for System Type. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 9 In the left pane. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Branch. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . urinal. and sinks. 7 In the left pane. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. For Offset. and click OK. enter 9' 3''. minimize the Sanitary system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. for System Type. 4 In the right pane. verify that the value is 9' 0''. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. for System Type. if necessary. 17 In the Filter dialog. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Pipe Types: Water. select Domestic Hot Water. click Check None. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Domestic Cold Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. and click Main. 15 In the plan view. select Pipe Types: Water.) 10 Click OK. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.

21 On the Edit System panel. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. For Flow Conversion Method. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. click Finish Editing System. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. enter DCW 107. In the System Browser. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 19 On the System Tools panel. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 .18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. click Edit System.

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. select 3/4''. for Offset. for Offset. 30 In the plan view. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 35 In the Type Selector. and press Enter. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. as shown. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 28 In the Type Selector. 36 Move the cursor to the left. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. and click Draw Pipe. enter 7''. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. click to the left of the urinal. and click to place the pipe. enter 4'0”. and click the connector. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. and press Enter. For Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. 34 In the plan view. enter 3' . at the intersection of the water main pipe.25 Using the same method. right-click the top DCW connector. select Water. 33 Click Modify. 32 Move the cursor to the right. enter 0”/12”. enter 10'. under Pipe Types.2 7/8''. For Slope. 31 On the Options Bar. as shown. select the sink above the urinal. connect the second toilet.

and click to connect to the main cold water line. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click OK. 41 Select the top sink. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 40 Click Modify. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.39 Move the cursor to the left.

connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. add a water heater. you create the hot water system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.44 Using the same method.

4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Plumbing Plan . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. 5 In the System Browser. expand the Unassigned folder. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 2 In the Project Browser. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 . Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select the 3 sinks.Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. while pressing Ctrl.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the plan view.rvt.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog. Default Domestic Cold Water. When designing systems. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first.6 Gallon. you edit the system to add equipment. for System Name. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 14 Click Modify. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector. in the Unassigned folder. and click Edit System. In later steps. as shown. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. under Water Heater . 15 In the System Browser. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. and click OK. 13 In the plan view. select 0. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Default Domestic Hot Water. 10 In the System Browser. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room.Tankless.

and press Enter. Offset: 4' 6''. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 23 On the Options Bar. and click the water main line. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. Slope: 0''/12''. right-click the middle left connector. 19 Select the water heater. click Finish Editing System. enter 10’. for Offset. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 22 In the Type Selector.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 24 Move the cursor up. and on the Edit System panel. as shown. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. 26 Move the cursor to the right. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. enter 1' 6''. 25 On the Options Bar. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . and select Draw Pipe. 27 Click Modify. select the water heater.

38 Move the cursor to the right. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). enter 9' 0''. click Edit System. and for Offset. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and in the System Selector. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. as shown. enter 1''. and on the Placement Tools panel. select a sink. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. and press Enter. for Diameter. select 4'-6''. 33 On the Edit System panel. and click Draw Pipe. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 30 On the System Tools panel. for Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 36 Move the cursor down. click Finish Editing System. enter 1' 6''.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view.

enter 1’. 42 Click Modify. and press Enter. as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Move the cursor down. and click just above the bottom sink. for Offset. enter 2' 8''. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 .39 Move the cursor down.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. You create a new pipe type. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. go to http://www. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.autodesk. 2 Right-click Standard. click Training Files. After finishing each exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this tutorial. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. If the tutorial training files are not present. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. you can choose to save your work.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. 267 . you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. and click Duplicate.

For Pipe Type. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. and click Properties. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 9 Click OK. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. under Mechanical. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. or architectural components. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. and then click OK. For Pipe Type. you modify the type properties of the pipe. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. However. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Main. verify that 9' 0" is specified. For Offset. verify that 9' 0" is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the next exercise. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. for Material. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. For System Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. and enter Fire Protection Wet. Next. select Carbon Steel. For System Type. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. click Rename. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). duct. structural beams. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. you create project parameters and work with schedules. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet.

select Spaces.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select space Instruction 221 as shown. and click Element Properties. for Sprinkler Zone. right-click. select the upper half of the building. 6 In the drawing area. enter Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK twice. 8 Using a crossing window. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .rvt. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select Fire Protection. click Training Files. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and then click OK. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. for Name. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. click Add. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. the space crossing lines display. For Group parameter under. enter Zone 1. indicating that it’s the active view. under Fire Protection.Fire Protection Plan . Under Categories. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i.

including a calculated value parameter. select Zone 1. and then click OK. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. under Fire Protection. verify that only Spaces are selected. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. to which you add various parameters. you create schedules for sprinkler design. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. enter Zone 2. click Training Files. under Fire Protection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Using the same method. and then click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and then access instance properties. for Sprinkler Zone. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Rounding.Fire Protection Plan . 6 Using the same method. for Name. and on the ribbon.Design is highlighted. In the Maximum Spacing column. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. For Name. 10 In the Format dialog. 9 On the Formatting tab.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Select Schedule keys. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click on each column separator. select To the nearest 1'. select Spaces. select Maximum Spacing. enter Light. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click the Formatting tab. For Units. select Feet and fractional inches. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter Protection Area Construction Type. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. For Type of Parameter. select Fire Protection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Key name. Click OK. 7 Click OK. and click Field Format. 11 Click OK twice. Obstructed-Combustible. click Add Parameter. enter Maximum Spacing. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . The schedule displays. select Length. 14 Select the new header. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. For Group parameter under. indicating that it’s the active view. enter 15.

NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. For Name. Unobstructed Extra. under Available fields. and press Enter. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. select Spaces. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. enter 130. 16 Using the same method.

The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. and click View Properties. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Number. enter Minimum Sprinklers. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Sprinkler Zone. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Type. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Discipline. In the Fields dialog. select Common. For Rounding. select 0 decimal place.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. select Minimum Sprinklers. for Sorting/Grouping. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . click Edit. select Fixed. and click Field Format. 19 Click the Formatting tab. click . The Sprinkler Schedule displays. For Then by. select Area. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sort by. 20 On the Formatting tab. under Other. Click OK. and click OK. For Units. Select Header and Blank line. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Formula. select Level. 22 Click OK twice.

select Minimum Sprinklers. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Grand totals.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. 30 Click OK twice. verify that Use default settings is selected. Under Field formatting. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 27 In the drawing area. for Filter by. For Fields. select Level equals Level 2. select Sprinkler Zone. For Fields. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Hidden field. For Then by (second instance). and click View Properties. and then select Hidden field. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 26 Click OK 3 times. At the bottom of the dialog. for Filter. ■ In the Format dialog. select Number. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the schedule. select Level. and then click Field Format. click Edit. and select Totals only.

click Edit. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Embedded Schedule. delete the word Maximum. Under Field formatting. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and select Totals only. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. System Name. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Embedded Schedule. for Fields. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. On the Formatting tab. select Sprinklers. select Calculate totals.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Grand totals. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Available fields. and click View Properties. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Count. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. double-click Type. and Count. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. For Category. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. double-click FP . select Ordinary. As a result. 52 Click OK. 50 Access the instance properties. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). you are actually editing information in a database of building information. but their values are not determined. select Light. Unobstructed. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Unobstructed. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select Ordinary. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select space 221 Instruction. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 43 Click Cancel. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool.Fire Protection Plan Design. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. and access the instance properties. 44 In the schedule. 46 With the space still selected. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 41 In the plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the spacing parameter values are evident. and click OK. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 48 In the floor plan. for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

you can choose to save your work.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. By following the recommended workflow. If the tutorial training files are not present. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. and double-click Level 2 . you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you will understand the process. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After finishing each exercise. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. However. 279 . you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.rvt. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. As you place the sprinklers. methodology. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . As you create the system. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. At the end of this tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. go to http://www. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. click Training Files.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. After placing the initial sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. When this happens. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When there is a small misalignment. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.

8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.Pendent . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and select Sprinkler . as shown. and click to place 3 sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . while pressing Ctrl. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Press Esc twice. select the sprinklers that you placed. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 9 In space Instruction 202. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.

Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Next. and then press Esc.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Also. as shown. verify that Constrain is cleared. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 13 On the Options Bar.

19 In the floor plan. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. enter 11. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.FP_Ceiling view. and press Enter. 18 Type WT. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. you place non-hosted sprinklers.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Notice that the schedule updates. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. move the cursor to the right. enter 10' 6". 25 Click OK. and 200C). click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. enter 14' 6".Design. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected.Fire Protection Plan . and click Element Properties. 200B. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . under Constraints. 29 Press Esc. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. you adjust the offset. For Number. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . for Offset. open Design ➤ FP . Next. This number is determined in the schedule. specify a vertical offset. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 17 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and with piping (physical connection).30 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). After creating the logical connection. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. However.rvt.Fire Protection Plan . 1 In the Project Browser. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Unlike logical connections (systems). In the next exercise. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

named Fire Protection Wet. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. and select Piping. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. as shown. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. In the System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. As you assign sprinklers to systems.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 5 Right-click the header. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. click View ➤ Systems. Creating a Piping System | 285 . It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces.

14 Click Finish Editing System. Next. 11 With the system still selected. 12 On the Options Bar. and a piping layout preview displays. and number of elements in the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. indicating the logical connection.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. for System Name. The Generate Layout tools are activated. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . For Offset. providing system editing tools.Wet is selected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Settings. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and select the system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Main is selected. 13 In the System Browser. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and on the Options Bar. The Edit Piping System panel displays. enter FP Wet_Zone2. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. For Pipe Type. select Branch. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. In the left pane. press Tab. place the cursor over a sprinkler. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. system equipment. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and click Select. select an initial piping layout. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 15 In the drawing area. 19 Click OK. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. for Diameter. click Solutions. verify that Network is selected. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. When the layout is finished. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. and select solution 5. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. as shown. and green represents branch lines). The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. click Place Base. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0").20 On the Generate Layout panel. 22 On the Options Bar. In general. enter -12' 0". 23 For Offset. select 2". 24 On the Generate Layout panel.

28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. as shown. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. A (parallel movement control) displays.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. On the Generate Layout panel. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. click Modify. 29 Click Finish Layout.

you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and various manual pipe creation tools. or manually modify the pipe. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and then you create piping to physically connect them.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. or that offset elevations are incorrect. the Connect Into tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Either relocate the system components. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Next. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 32 If necessary. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. select a different layout solution. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

2 Zoom in.Fire Protection Plan . 3 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.Design is highlighted. and select the elbow fitting as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

click Add To System. air terminals. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 13 Click Finish Layout. 12 On the Options Bar. and select solution 5. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and pipe or duct is created. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. verify that Network is selected. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 18 Click Finish Editing System. radiators. you can select the pipe or duct. and so on) are logically connected by a system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 9 On the Edit System panel. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 14 Close the System Browser. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. for Solution Type. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. click Finish Editing System. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. mechanical equipment. 8 In the corridor. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 5 In the drawing area. or a system component to display system tools. verify that Solutions is selected. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.

right-click. and then tile the views. 29 Using the same method. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 24 In the Piping Plan. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select 9'.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. for Offset. 28 In the drawing area. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 23 View the result in the 3D view. and then press Esc. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 27 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Piping Plan. and click Draw Pipe. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.20 Open Design ➤ FP .

and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 31 In the plan view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Because the whole system highlights.

2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 4 On the Options Bar.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ■ 6 Press Esc. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. for Scale. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.Fire Protection Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select 1/4" = 1'-0".Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . double-click on the section head to open the section view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.rvt. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

21 On the Options Bar. select 4". 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

23 Close the 3D view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 24 In the drawing area. for Diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . The pipe diameter is modified. and then tag the piping as shown. 26 Using the same method. as shown. and maximize the floor plan. select 1 1/4". Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 25 On the Options Bar.

Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You added tags to pipes. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In this exercise. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you created a wet fire protection system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . For additional practice. In this tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. create details. 305 . add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

matchlines. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. dependent views. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 307 . under Floor Plans. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. 2 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. right-click Level 1. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and view references. click Training Files. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . If the view included detail graphics. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and apply a view template. right-click Copy of Level 1.

6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. click Training Files. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and then press Esc. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. and click Apply Default View Template. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. more focused. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 10 In the drawing area. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 2 Right-click the dependent view title.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Using the same method. and click OK. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 9 Click OK. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. views and put them on the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. create dependent views for areas B and C. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point.rvt. and click Rename.

and then press Esc. In the Color dialog. 19 In the drawing area. and click OK. For Line Weight. 20 Select the upper view reference and. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 21 Using the same method. select black. Click OK. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog./ ---). 13 Press Esc twice. on the Options Bar. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. For Line Pattern. select 11. click the current value. 14 Click Finish Matchline. for Target view. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select Double Dash 5/8".

indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 27 Using the same method. as shown. 25 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and zoom to each of the view references. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.

for View Classification. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.Domestic Water. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for View Name. 2 Zoom in. 4 In the Project Browser. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 6 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing. enter Plumbing Isometric . right-click 3D Plumbing. select Documentation. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click to select it. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. The section crop lines no longer display. and click Apply Default View Template. Click OK. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. For Sub-Discipline. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. select Plumbing Isometric.rvt. Under Graphics. and select the section box. click Training Files.29 Close the file with or without saving it.Domestic Water. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and click Properties.

change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 12 Using the same method.9 Right-click. press Tab 3 times. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and then click OK. select 3. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click to select it. For Pattern. select Dash. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. Click Apply.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. as shown). Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 14 Right-click.

and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.Domestic Water view with detailing. On the View Control Bar. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 18 Using methods learned previously. and click to select it. In the drawing area. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. click Reveal Hidden Elements. press Tab 3 times.15 Press Esc. On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. 17 Label the fixtures as shown.Sanitary Waste. Right-click.

Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. In the Format dialog. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. click on the Format value. and then place the callout view on a sheet. you use a plan view to create a callout view. as shown. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 25 Press Esc twice. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 21 Click OK twice. Creating Callout Views | 315 . and click to place the spot slope annotation. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. When the view is associated with a sheet. select To the nearest 1/8". for Rounding. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. verify that Common is selected. For Slope.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. for Scale. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select 1/4"=1'-0''. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

double-click M601 . Creating Callout Views | 317 . ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. under Sheets (all). 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. for Line Weight. select 5. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. drag it to the sheet. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Click OK.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 13 In the Project Browser. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. using the same method.

right-click the callout view. 17 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. for View Name. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter WSHP PART PLAN.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Click OK. and select the viewport. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Apply View Template. under Names. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. enter Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Rename.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

linetypes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 321 . ■ work with model-based components. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. duct tags. and annotation to create a legend. symbols. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.

rvt. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. as shown. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 8 With the text still selected. click Training Files.

16 In the drawing area. a segment of round duct. select a supply diffuser. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Annotations | 323 . verify that Leader is cleared. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. as shown. a return diffuser. and a segment of rectangular duct. and then click Right Straight. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.9 Press Esc twice. 15 On the Options Bar. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.

The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. If necessary.rfa. 24 On the Options Bar. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. under Category. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the Tags dialog. and click Open. for Ducts. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. click Load. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 17 Click Modify. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 20 In the Tags dialog. clear Leader. 21 In the Load Family dialog. and click OK.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . tag the remaining diffusers in the area.

select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Leader. 32 In the drawing area. and Attached End. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and then press Esc. 26 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 325 . 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.25 In the drawing area. as shown. select Horizontal.

for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

Creating Dimensions | 327 . and lock lighting fixtures. and all elements of that type are affected. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. select the last tag placed. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. That’s because you changed a type property. select Dot Open 1/16". Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. you use temporary dimensions to locate. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and click OK. for Leader Arrowhead. lay out. 40 Using the method learned previously. not simply an instance property.36 Press Esc twice. 37 In the drawing area. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown.

rvt. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. select the dimension line. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the Options Bar. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and then select the interior face of the wall. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 12 Press Esc. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish.

click the 3 interior locks on the line. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the dimensions are locked. enter 8'. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.3 1/2"). Creating a Legend In this exercise. annotation symbols. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Legend | 329 . add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. linework. 16 Press Esc.13 Using the same method. and notes. 19 Using the same methods. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . and press Enter. and offset them 8' from the wall.

enter Diffuser Legend. For Scale. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click below the title to place the diffuser. click Training Files. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click in the drawing area.rvt. Click OK. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Using the same method. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . select Floor Plan. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.8 Neck. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. For View. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. select 1/4" = 1' -0".

Creating a Legend | 331 .11 Press Esc. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 14 In the drawing area. click next to the top diffuser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. The selected detail lines are now thin. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 26 Press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.DROP and its text note. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. and then press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 27 While pressing Ctrl.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Press Esc. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point. 24 Select the component’s break line. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. Creating a Legend | 333 . 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 34 Using the method learned previously. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.MECHANICAL LEGEND. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 35 Change the text on the right to N. enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify.30 Select Spot Elevation . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc.

2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .Detailing 15 In this lesson. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and text. A drafting view using detail components. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. click Training Files. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. A detail callout that references another view. detail groups. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.113 East elevation view. 335 . you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.

Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. place Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Next.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 5 In the drawing area. and click to place it. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. select each of the 2 panelboards. 4 On the Options Bar.113 East on the sheet. and then modify and align the views. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 8 Using the same method.

9 Press Esc. giving the appearance of a single view. 13 Right-click. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 Select the Level 1 line. select the 113 North view. and click Deactivate View. for Title on Sheet. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. under Identity Data. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. right-click. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Activate View. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left.

Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. right-click. 22 Press Esc. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the 113 East elevation view. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. as shown. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. you add wiring to the diagram. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 19 Select the Level 1 line. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 21 Using the drag control. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and click Activate View. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. In the next exercise. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the New Subcategory dialog. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. In the Line Styles dialog. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter Electrical Power. and click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser. for Line Weight.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . verify that Chain is selected. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . As you draw. expand Lines. click New. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. and then click OK.113 North view. click Training Files. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). select 6. 8 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 9 Beginning at the transformer. notice that there are no snaps active. Under Modify Subcategories. for Name.

enter 1/8". for Offset. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.10 Press Esc. as shown. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 11 Using the same method.

so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 29 Click Modify. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 28 Click above the cap. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. as shown. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 33 On the Options Bar. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .31 While pressing Ctrl. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.5. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . You enter exact values for each line length. enter 0 0. 39 Move the cursor to the right. enter 3/32". and then press Esc. 40 Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. and press Enter.36 Press Esc. for Offset. 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Press Esc. and press Enter.125. Using the same method. 46 In the Project Browser. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. select all 3 lines. expand Groups ➤ Detail. you can ensure that they stay together. for Name. and then press Esc. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. click on the length dimension value. and click OK. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 50 With the group selected.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line.25. while pressing Ctrl. 47 In the drawing area. enter 0 0. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. enter Ground.

56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.51 Using the method learned previously. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 54 Select the group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 52 Select the detail group.

3 In the Rename View dialog. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Rename. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). for Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. click Training Files. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. In later exercises. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 2 Right-click the copy. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and will place it on sheet E01. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click OK. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.

and then press Esc. and Left sides converge. 7 On the ViewCube.6 Select the section box. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then click the corner where the Top. click Home. Back.

and click Apply View Template. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. right-click. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Under Names. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. select 3D Views. select 3D HVAC Iso. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Walkthroughs. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Click OK. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created.

as shown. 15 Using the same method. Move the cursor down and to the left. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . (Right). 19 Complete the text labels. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. and click to specify the second leader point. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Typical. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.

select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. and then click OK. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible.To rotate and reposition a text label. 25 Click OK. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. as shown. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. select Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. under Extents. 23 Click on the crop region. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.

Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Scale. select the isometric view.29 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).rvt. Click OK. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. and click Properties. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. click Training Files. select 3" = 1'-0". you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. right-click the view name. 3 In the Project Browser. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Place a detail component.

select Documentation. 12 On the Element panel.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Plumbing. click the point at the top of the drain. 9 Zoom in to the component. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Sub-Discipline. as shown. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. as the rectangle start point. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". For View Classification. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Click OK. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 13 In the drawing area. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

P. select C. select the filled region. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click OK.I. and then press Esc.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Concrete. (Line). 21 In the drawing area. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 22 Click Modify. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 18 With the filled region still selected. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 20 Select 1. for Type. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 In the drawing area.

356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew.28 Click Modify. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then click to select them. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point.

Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then select the side of the slab above the line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 45 Using the method learned previously. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. and then press Esc.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. (Rectangle). 40 Click Finish Region. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. as shown. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

press Tab to highlight the chain. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.. for Name. draw wide detail lines as shown. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Flashing Membrane_F. and click OK. 49 Click Modify. and then click to select them. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. select the Flashing Membrane group. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. as shown.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 52 In the Create Group dialog.D.

59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.

66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 72 If necessary. and then click OK. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 71 Click Modify. select Leader and Free End. 64 Press Esc twice.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 67 On the Options Bar. 70 In the Keynotes dialog.62 Press Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.

75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click to specify the second leader point.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the text insertion point. 81 Select the text note.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown.

and click to place it. open P103 . and then press Esc twice.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. select the view title. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 90 Press Esc. 88 In the drawing area. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.

For Colors. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you import a CAD detail drawing. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. select Black and White. Click Open.dwg. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. Click OK. for Line Weight. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. select Visible. For Import units. For A-----NPP. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. For Layers.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Auto-Detect. select 3. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial.

11 Press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.8 Type ZF. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 In the drawing area. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . open P103 . and then press Esc. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. select the viewport title. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.

366 .